kettle doc interim fix

src/doc/_module_fauxlink-0.1.1.tm.man

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
 [manpage_begin fauxlink_module_fauxlink 0 0.1.1]
 [copyright "2024"]
 [titledesc {faux link application shortcuts}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
-[moddesc {fauxlink .fxlnk}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[moddesc {.fauxlink .fxlnk}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
 [require fauxlink]
 [keywords symlink faux fake shortcut toml]
 [description]
@@ -13,18 +13,19 @@
 [para] A solution is required for application-driven filesystem links that survives cross platform moves as well as
 [para] archiving and packaging systems.
 [para] The target is specified in a minimally-encoded form in the filename itself - but still human readable.
-[para] format of name <nominalname>#<encodedtarget>.fxlnk
+[para] format of name <nominalname>#<encodedtarget>.fauxlink
 [para] where <nominalname> can be empty - then the effective nominal name is the tail of the <encodedtarget>
+[para] The file extension must be .fauxlink or .fxlnk
 [para] The + symbol substitutes for forward-slashes.
 [para] Other chars can be encoded using url-like encoding - (but only up to %7E !)
 [para] We deliberately treat higher % sequences literally.
 [para] This means actual uri::urn encoded unicode sequences (e.g %E2%99%A5 [lb]heart[rb]) can remain literal for linking to urls.
 [para] e.g if an actual + or # is required in a filename or path segment they can be encoded as %2B & %23
 [para] e.g a link to a file file#A.txt in parent dir could be:
-[para] file%23A.txt#..+file%23A.txt.fxlnk
+[para] file%23A.txt#..+file%23A.txt.fauxlink
-[para] or equivalently (but obviously affecting sorting) #..+file%23A.txt.fxlnk
+[para] or equivalently (but obviously affecting sorting) #..+file%23A.txt.fauxlink
 [para] The <nominalname> can be unrelated to the actual target
-[para] e.g datafile.dat#..+file%23A.txt.fxlnk
+[para] e.g datafile.dat#..+file%23A.txt.fauxlink
 [para] This system has no filesystem support - and must be completely application driven.
 [para] This can be useful for example in application test packages which may be tarred or zipped and moved cross platform.
 [para] The target being fully specified in the name means the file doesn't have to be read for the target to be determined

src/doc/_module_modpod-0.1.3.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin modpod_module_modpod 0 0.1.3]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require modpod]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of modpod
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by modpod
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace modpod::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace modpod}]
+[para] Core API functions for modpod
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace modpod ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace modpod::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace modpod::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+[subsection {Namespace modpod::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_overtype-1.6.6.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin overtype_module_overtype 0 1.6.6]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {overtype text layout - ansi aware}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {overtype text layout}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require overtype]
+[keywords module text ansi]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of overtype
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by overtype
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package textutil]
+[item] [package punk::ansi]
+[para] - required to detect, split, strip and calculate lengths of text possibly containing ansi codes
+[item] [package punk::char]
+[para] - box drawing - and also unicode character width determination for proper layout of text with double-column-width chars
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace overtype}]
+[para] Core API functions for overtype
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun overtype::renderspace] [arg args] ]
+[para]	usage: ?-transparent [lb]0|1[rb]? ?-expand_right [lb]1|0[rb]? ?-ellipsis [lb]1|0[rb]? ?-ellipsistext ...? undertext overtext
+[call [fun overtype::renderline] [arg args] ]
+[para] renderline is the core engine for overtype string processing (frames & textblocks), and the raw mode commandline repl for the Tcl Punk Shell
+[para] It is also a central part of an ansi (micro) virtual terminal-emulator of sorts
+[para] This system does a half decent job at rendering 90's ANSI art to manipulable colour text blocks that can be joined & framed for layout display within a unix or windows terminal
+[para] Renderline helps maintain ANSI text styling reset/replay codes so that the styling of one block doesn't affect another.
+[para] Calling on the punk::ansi library - it can coalesce codes to keep the size down.
+[para] It is a giant mess of doing exactly what common wisdom says not to do... lots at once.
+[para] renderline is part of the Unicode and ANSI aware Overtype system which 'renders' a block of text onto a static underlay
+[para] The underlay is generally expected to be an ordered set of lines or a rectangular text block analogous to a terminal screen - but it can also be ragged in line length, or just blank.
+[para] The overlay couuld be similar - in which case it may often be used to overwrite a column or section of the underlay.
+[para] The overlay could however be a sequence of ANSI-laden text that jumps all over the place.
+
+[para] renderline itself only deals with a single line - or sometimes a single character.  It is generally called from a loop that does further terminal-like or textblock processing.
+[para] By suppyling the -info 1 option - it can return various fields indicating the state of the render.
+[para] The main 3 are the result, overflow_right, and unapplied.
+[para] Renderline handles cursor movements from either keystrokes or ANSI sequences but for a full system the aforementioned loop will need to be in place to manage the set of lines under manipulation.
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace overtype ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_picalc-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_picalc 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require picalc]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of picalc
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by picalc
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package {punk::lib}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace picalc}]
+[para] Core API functions for picalc
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace picalc ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace picalc::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace picalc::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_pipe-1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_pipe 0 1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require pipe]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of pipe
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by pipe
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace pipe::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+[subsection {Namespace pipe}]
+[para] Core API functions for pipe
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace pipe ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace pipe::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace pipe::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval pipe::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace pipe::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_termscheme-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace termscheme::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }
@@ -37,6 +38,7 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace termscheme::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval termscheme::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace termscheme::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_textblock-0.1.1.tm.man

@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
-[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
-[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
-[manpage_begin punkshell_module_textblock 0 0.1.1]
-[copyright "2024"]
-[titledesc {punk textblock functions}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
-[moddesc {punk textblock}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
-[require textblock]
-[keywords module utility lib]
-[description]
-[para] Ansi-aware terminal textblock manipulation
-[section Overview]
-[para] overview of textblock
-[subsection Concepts]
-[para]
-[subsection dependencies]
-[para] packages used by textblock
-[list_begin itemized]
-[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
-[item] [package {punk::args}]
-[item] [package {punk::char}]
-[item] [package {punk::ansi}]
-[item] [package {punk::lib}]
-[item] [package {overtype}]
-[item] [package {term::ansi::code::macros}]
-[item] [package {textutil}]
-[list_end]
-[section API]
-[subsection {Namespace textblock::class}]
-[para] class definitions
-[list_begin itemized] [comment {- textblock::class groupings -}]
-  [item]
-  [para] [emph {handler_classes}]
-  [list_begin enumerated]
-[enum] CLASS [class textblock::class::table]
-[list_begin definitions]
-    [para] [emph METHODS]
-[call class::table [method constructor] [arg args]]
-[call class::table [method add_column] [arg args]]
-[call class::table [method add_row] [arg args]]
-[list_end]
-  [list_end] [comment {- end enumeration provider_classes }]
-[list_end] [comment {- end itemized list textblock::class groupings -}]
-    Already uniform blocks will join faster than textblock::join, and ragged blocks will join in a ragged manner
-"
-[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_textblock-0.1.3.tm.man

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 [comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
-[manpage_begin punkshell_module_textblock 0 0.1.2]
+[manpage_begin punkshell_module_textblock 0 0.1.3]
 [copyright "2024"]
 [titledesc {punk textblock functions}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
 [moddesc {punk textblock}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
 [call class::table [method header_colspans]]
 [para] Show the colspans configured for all headers
 [call class::table [method configure_header]]
-[para] - undocumented
+[para] - configure header row-wise
 [call class::table [method add_row]\
   [arg valuelist]\
   [opt "[option -minheight] [arg int_minheight]"]\
@@ -113,8 +113,4 @@
 [list_end]
   [list_end] [comment {- end enumeration provider_classes }]
 [list_end] [comment {- end itemized list textblock::class groupings -}]
-    Already uniform blocks will join faster than textblock::join, and ragged blocks will join in a ragged manner
-"
-    Already uniform blocks will join faster than textblock::join, and ragged blocks will join in a ragged manner
-"
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_tomlish-1.1.2.tm.man

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 [comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
-[manpage_begin tomlish_module_tomlish 0 1.1.1]
+[manpage_begin tomlish_module_tomlish 0 1.1.2]
 [copyright "2024"]
 [titledesc {tomlish toml parser}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
 [moddesc {tomlish}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace tomlish::decode}]
 [para]
 [list_begin definitions]
-[call [fun toml] [arg s]]
+[call [fun toml] [arg arg...]]
 [para] return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::decode ---}]
 [subsection {Namespace tomlish::utils}]

src/doc/_module_tomlish-1.1.3.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin tomlish_module_tomlish 0 1.1.3]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {tomlish toml parser}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {tomlish}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require tomlish]
+[keywords module parsing toml configuration]
+[description]
+[para] tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+[para] The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+[para] The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+[para] although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+[para] The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e.g \t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable.
+[para] A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments.
+[para] e.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+[para] The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+[para] e.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+[para] will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int.
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of tomlish
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by tomlish
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[item] [package {struct::stack}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish}]
+[para] Core API functions for tomlish
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun json_to_toml] [arg json]]
+[para]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::encode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::encode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::decode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun toml] [arg arg...]]
+[para] return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::decode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::utils}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::utils ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::parse}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::parse ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::app}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call app::[fun decoder] [arg args]]
+[para] read toml on stdin until EOF
+[para] on error   - returns non-zero exit code and writes error on stderr
+[para] on success - returns zero exit code and writes JSON encoding of the data on stdout
+[para] This decoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+[call app::[fun encoder] [arg args]]
+[para] read JSON on stdin until EOF
+[para] return non-zero exitcode if JSON data cannot be converted to a valid TOML representation
+[para] return zero exitcode and TOML data on stdout if JSON data can be converted.
+[para] This encoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::app ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_tomlish-1.1.4.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin tomlish_module_tomlish 0 1.1.4]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {tomlish toml parser}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {tomlish}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require tomlish]
+[keywords module parsing toml configuration]
+[description]
+[para] tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+[para] The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+[para] The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+[para] although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+[para] The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e.g \t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable.
+[para] A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments.
+[para] e.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+[para] The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+[para] e.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+[para] will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int.
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of tomlish
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by tomlish
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[item] [package {struct::stack}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish}]
+[para] Core API functions for tomlish
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun json_to_toml] [arg json]]
+[para]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::encode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::encode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::decode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun toml] [arg arg...]]
+[para] return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::decode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::utils}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::utils ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::parse}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::parse ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::app}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call app::[fun decoder] [arg args]]
+[para] read toml on stdin until EOF
+[para] on error   - returns non-zero exit code and writes error on stderr
+[para] on success - returns zero exit code and writes JSON encoding of the data on stdout
+[para] This decoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+[call app::[fun encoder] [arg args]]
+[para] read JSON on stdin until EOF
+[para] return non-zero exitcode if JSON data cannot be converted to a valid TOML representation
+[para] return zero exitcode and TOML data on stdout if JSON data can be converted.
+[para] This encoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::app ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_tomlish-1.1.5.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin tomlish_module_tomlish 0 1.1.5]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {tomlish toml parser}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {tomlish}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require tomlish]
+[keywords module parsing toml configuration]
+[description]
+[para] tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+[para] The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+[para] The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+[para] although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+[para] The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e.g \t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable.
+[para] A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments.
+[para] e.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+[para] The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+[para] e.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+[para] will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int.
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of tomlish
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by tomlish
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[item] [package {struct::stack}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish}]
+[para] Core API functions for tomlish
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun json_to_toml] [arg json]]
+[para]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::encode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::encode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::decode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun toml] [arg arg...]]
+[para] return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::decode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::utils}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::utils ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::parse}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::parse ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::app}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::app ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/_module_tomlish-1.1.6.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin tomlish_module_tomlish 0 1.1.6]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {tomlish toml parser}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {tomlish}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require tomlish]
+[keywords module parsing toml configuration]
+[description]
+[para] tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+[para] The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+[para] The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+[para] although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+[para] The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e.g \t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable.
+[para] A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments.
+[para] e.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+[para] The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+[para] e.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+[para] will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int.
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of tomlish
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by tomlish
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[item] [package {struct::stack}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish}]
+[para] Core API functions for tomlish
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun typedjson_to_toml] [arg json]]
+[para]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::encode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::encode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::decode}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::decode ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::utils}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::utils ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::parse}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::parse ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::app}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::app ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::lib ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace tomlish::system}]
+[para]
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun lindex_resolve_basic] [arg list] [arg index]]
+[para] Accepts index of the forms accepted by Tcl's list commands. (e.g compound indices such as 3+1 end-2)
+[para] returns -1 for out of range at either end, or a valid integer index
+[para] Unlike lindex_resolve; lindex_resolve_basic can't determine if an out of range index was out of range at the lower or upper bound
+[para] This is only likely to be faster than average over lindex_resolve for Tcl which has the builtin lseq command
+[para] The performance advantage is more likely to be present when using compound indexes such as $x+1 or end-1
+[para] For pure integer indices the performance should be equivalent
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace tomlish::system ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_ansi-0.1.1.tm.man

@@ -75,6 +75,7 @@
 [para][example {punk::ansi::move_emit 10 10 blah {*}[punk::console::get_cursor_pos_list] DONE}]
 [para]A string created by any move_emit_return for punk::ansi would not behave in an intuitive manner compared to other punk::ansi move functions - so is deliberately omitted.
 [call [fun move_emitblock] [arg row] [arg col] [arg textblock]]
+[call [fun move_emitblock] [arg row] [arg col] [arg textblock]]
 [call [fun move_forward] [arg n]]
 [call [fun move_back] [arg n]]
 [call [fun move_up] [arg n]]

src/doc/punk/_module_args-0.2.tm.man

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 [comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
-[manpage_begin punkshell_module_punk::args 0 0.1.0]
+[manpage_begin punkshell_module_punk::args 0 0.2]
 [copyright "2024"]
 [titledesc {args parsing}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
 [moddesc {args to nested dict of opts and values}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
@@ -25,19 +25,19 @@
 [para]The proc can still contain some leading required values e.g  [example "proc dostuff {arg1 arg2 args} {...}}"]
 [para]but having the core values elements at the end of args is arguably more generally useful - especially in cases where the number of trailing values is unknown and/or the proc is to be called in a functional 'pipeline' style.
 [para]
-[para]The basic principle is that a call to punk::args::get_dict is made near the beginning of the proc with a cacheable first argument defining the parameters e.g
+[para]The basic principle is that a call to punk::args::parse is made near the beginning of the proc with a cacheable argument defining the parameters e.g
 [example {
    proc dofilestuff {args} {
-       lassign [dict values [punk::args::get_dict {
+       lassign [dict values [punk::args::parse $args withdef {
-           *proc -help "do some stuff with files e.g dofilestuff <file1> <file2> <file3>"
+           @cmd -help "do some stuff with files e.g dofilestuff <file1> <file2> <file3>"
-           *opts -type string
+           @opts -type string
            #comment lines ok
            -directory   -default ""
            -translation -default binary
            #setting -type none indicates a flag that doesn't take a value (solo flag)
            -nocomplain -type none
-           *values -min 1 -max -1
+           @values -min 1 -max -1
-       } $args]] leaders opts values
+       }]] leaders opts values
 
        puts "translation is [dict get $opts -translation]"
        foreach f [dict values $values] {
@@ -45,38 +45,40 @@
        }
    }
 }]
-[para]The lines beginning with * are optional in most cases and can be used to set defaults and some extra controls
+[para]The lines beginning with @ are usually optional in most cases and can be used to set defaults and some extra controls
-[para] - the above example would work just fine with only the -<optionname> lines, but would allow zero filenames to be supplied as no -min value is set for *values
+[para] - the above example would work just fine with only the -<optionname> lines, but would allow zero filenames to be supplied as no -min value is set for @values
-[para]valid * lines being with *proc *leaders *opts *values
+[para]valid @ lines being with @cmd @leaders @opts @values
 [para]lines beginning with a dash define options - a name can optionally be given to each trailing positional argument.
 [para]If no names are defined for positional arguments, they will end up in the values key of the dict with numerical keys starting at zero.
-[para]e.g the result from the punk::args call above may be something like:
+[para]e.g the result from the punk::args::parse call above may be something like:
-[para] opts {-translation binary -directory "" -nocomplain 0} values {0 file1.txt 1 file2.txt 2 file3.txt}
+[para] leaders {} opts {-translation binary -directory "" -nocomplain 0} values {0 file1.txt 1 file2.txt 2 file3.txt}
 [para]Here is an example that requires the number of values supplied to be exactly 2 and names the positional arguments
 [para]It also demonstrates an inital argument 'category' that is outside of the scope for punk::args processing - allowing leading and trailing positional arguments
+[para]This could also be implemented entirely using args - and the @leaders category of arguments
 [example {
    proc dofilestuff {category args} {
-       lassign [dict values [punk::args::get_dict {
+       lassign [dict values [punk::args::parse $args withdef {
+            @id -id ::dofilestuff
            -directory   -default ""
            -translation -default binary
            -nocomplain -type none
-           *values -min 2 -max 2
+           @values -min 2 -max 2
             fileA -type existingfile 1
             fileB -type existingfile 1
-       } $args]] leaders opts values
+       }]] leaders opts values
        puts "$category fileA: [dict get $values fileA]"
        puts "$category fileB: [dict get $values fileB]"
    }
 }]
-[para]By using standard tcl proc named arguments prior to args, and setting *values -min 0 -max 0
+[para]By using standard tcl proc named arguments prior to args, and setting @values -min 0 -max 0
 [para]a Tk-style ordering can be acheived, where punk::args is only handling the trailing flags and the values element of the returned dict can be ignored
 [para]This use of leading positional arguments means the type validation features can't be applied to them. It can be done manually as usual,
 [para] or an additional call could be made to punk::args e.g
 [example {
-       punk::args::get_dict {
+       punk::args::parse [list $category $another_leading_arg] withdef {
            category                -choices {cat1 cat2 cat3}
            another_leading_arg     -type boolean
-       } [list $category $another_leading_arg]
+       }
 }]
 [subsection Notes]
 [para]For internal functions not requiring features such as solo flags, prefix matching, type checking etc - a well crafted switch statement will be the fastest pure-tcl solution.
@@ -164,7 +166,7 @@ For functions that are part of an API a package may be more suitable.
 [item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
 [list_end]
 [section API]
-[subsection {Namespace punk::args}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::args::register}]
 [para] cooperative namespace punk::args::register
 [para] punk::args aware packages may add their own namespace to the public list variable NAMESPACES before or after punk::args is loaded
 [para] The punk::args package will then test for a public list variable <namepace>::PUNKARGS containing argument definitions when it needs to.
@@ -173,23 +175,23 @@ For functions that are part of an API a package may be more suitable.
 [subsection {Namespace punk::args}]
 [para] Core API functions for punk::args
 [list_begin definitions]
-[call [fun get_dict] [arg optionspecs] [arg rawargs]]
+[call [fun get_dict] [arg deflist] [arg rawargs] [arg args]]
 [para]Parse rawargs as a sequence of zero or more option-value pairs followed by zero or more values
 [para]Returns a dict of the form: opts <options_dict> values <values_dict>
 [para]ARGUMENTS:
 [list_begin arguments]
-[arg_def multiline-string optionspecs]
+[arg_def list-of-multiline-string deflist]
-[para] This a block of text with records delimited by newlines (lf or crlf) - but with multiline values allowed if properly quoted/braced
+[para] These are blocks of text with records delimited by newlines (lf or crlf) - but with multiline values allowed if properly quoted/braced
 [para]'info complete' is used to determine if a record spans multiple lines due to multiline values
 [para]Each optionspec line defining a flag must be of the form:
 [para]-optionname -key val -key2 val2...
-[para]where the valid keys for each option specification are: -default -type -range -choices -optional
+[para]where the valid keys for each option specification are: -default -type -range -choices -optional etc
 [para]Each optionspec line defining a positional argument is of the form:
 [para]argumentname -key val -ky2 val2...
 [para]where the valid keys for each option specification are: -default -type -range -choices
 [para]comment lines begining with # are ignored and can be placed anywhere except within a multiline value where it would become part of that value
-[para]lines beginning with *proc *leaders *opts or *values also take -key val pairs and can be used to set defaults and control settings.
+[para]lines beginning with @cmd @leaders @opts or @values also take -key val pairs and can be used to set defaults and control settings.
-[para]*opts or *values lines can appear multiple times with defaults affecting flags/values that follow.
+[para]@opts or @values lines can appear multiple times with defaults affecting flags/values that follow.
 [arg_def list rawargs]
 [para] This is a list of the arguments to parse. Usually it will be the $args value from the containing proc,
 but it could be a manually constructed list of values made for example from positional args defined in the proc.

src/doc/punk/_module_assertion-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -28,7 +28,6 @@
 [para] class definitions
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
-tcl::namespace::import ::punk::assertion::primary::assertActive
 [subsection {Namespace punk::assertion}]
 [para] Core API functions for punk::assertion
 [list_begin definitions]

src/doc/punk/_module_basictelnet-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@
 [para] packages used by punk::basictelnet
 [list_begin itemized]
 [item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
 [list_end]
 [section API]
 [subsection {Namespace punk::basictelnet::class}]

src/doc/punk/_module_blockletter-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -25,6 +25,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace punk::blockletter::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }
@@ -40,6 +41,7 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::blockletter::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::blockletter::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace punk::blockletter::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_cap-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -66,11 +66,6 @@ namespace eval capsystem {
 [para] The above example declares that your package can be registered as a provider for the capabilities named 'punk.templates' and 'another_capability_name'
     [list_begin definitions]
     [para] [emph METHODS]
-[call class::interface_capprovider.registration [method get_declarations]]
-[para] This method must be overridden by your provider using oo::objdefine cappprovider.registration as in the example above.
- There must be at least one 2-element list in the result for the provider to be registerable.
-[para]The first element of the list is the capabilityname - which can be custom to your provider/handler packages - or a well-known name that other authors may use/implement.
-[para]The second element is a dictionary of keys specific to the capability being implemented. It may be empty if the any potential capability handlers for the named capability don't require registration data.
     [list_end]
     [enum] CLASS [class interface_capprovider.provider]
     [para] Your provider package will need to instantiate this directly under it's own namespace with the command name of [emph {provider}]

src/doc/punk/_module_cesu-0.1.1.tm.man

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 [comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
 [comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
-[manpage_begin punkshell_module_punk::cesu 0 0.1.0]
+[manpage_begin punkshell_module_punk::cesu 0 0.1.1]
 [copyright "2024"]
 [titledesc {CESU compatibility ehcoding scheme for utf-16: 8-Bit (CESU-8) ??}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
 [moddesc {CESU experimental}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
@@ -31,6 +31,7 @@
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::cesu::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::cesu::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace punk::cesu::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_fileline-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
 [para] Constructor for textinfo object which represents a chunk or all of a file
 [para] datachunk should be passed with the file data including line-endings as-is for full functionality. ie use something like:
 [example_begin]
-    fconfigure $fd -translation binary
+    chan configure $fd -translation binary
     set chunkdata [lb]read $fd[rb]]
 or
     set chunkdata [lb]fileutil::cat <filename> -translation binary[rb]

src/doc/punk/_module_icomm-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::icomm 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::icomm]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::icomm
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::icomm
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::icomm::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+[subsection {Namespace punk::icomm}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::icomm
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::icomm ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::icomm::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::icomm::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::icomm::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace punk::icomm::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_imap4-0.9.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin punkshell_module_punk::imap4 0 0.9]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {IMAP4 client}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {IMAP4 client}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::imap4]
+[keywords module mail imap imap4 client mailclient]
+[description]
+[para] An implementation of IMAP4 (rev1+?) client protocol
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::imap4
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::imap4
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6.2-}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
+[item] [package {punk::lib}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::imap4}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::imap4
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::imap4 ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::imap4::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::imap4::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_lib-0.1.1.tm.man

@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ but has the disadvantage of being slower for 'small' numbers and using more memo
 [para]Returns another textblock with lines sorted
 [para]options are flags as accepted by lsort ie -ascii -command -decreasing -dictionary -index -indices -integer -nocase -real -stride -unique
 [call [fun list_as_lines] [opt {-joinchar char}] [arg linelist]]
-[para]This simply joines the elements of the list with -joinchar
+[para]This simply joins the elements of the list with -joinchar
 [para]It is mainly intended for use in pipelines where the primary argument comes at the end - but it can also be used as a general replacement for join $lines <le>
 [para]The sister function lines_as_list takes a block of text and splits it into lines - but with more options related to trimming the block and/or each line.
 [call [fun lines_as_list] [opt {option value ...}] [arg text]]

src/doc/punk/_module_lib-0.1.2.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin punkshell_module_punk::lib 0 0.1.2]
+[copyright "2024"]
+[titledesc {punk general utility functions}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {punk library}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::lib]
+[keywords module utility lib]
+[description]
+[para]This is a set of utility functions that are commonly used across punk modules or are just considered to be general-purpose functions.
+[para]The base set includes string and math functions but has no specific theme
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::lib
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para]The punk::lib modules should have no strong dependencies other than Tcl
+[para]Dependendencies that only affect display or additional functionality may be included - but should fail gracefully if not present, and only when a function is called that uses one of these soft dependencies.
+[para]This requirement for no strong dependencies, means that many utility functions that might otherwise seem worthy of inclusion here are not present.
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::lib
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::lib::compat}]
+[para] compatibility functions for features that may not be available in earlier Tcl versions
+[para] These are generally 'forward compatibility' functions ie allowing earlier versions to use later features/idioms by using a Tcl-only version of a missing builtin.
+[para] Such Tcl-only versions will inevitably be less performant - perhaps significantly so.
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun lremove] [arg list] [opt {index ...}]]
+[para] Forwards compatible lremove for versions 8.6 or less to support equivalent 8.7 lremove
+[call [fun lpop] [arg listvar] [opt {index}]]
+[para] Forwards compatible lpop for versions 8.6 or less to support equivalent 8.7 lpop
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::lib::compat ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::lib}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::lib
+[list_begin definitions]
+[call [fun invoke] [arg command]]
+[para]Invoke an external command (using tcl open command) capturing stdout,stderr and the exitcode
+[example {
+    set script {
+       puts stdout {hello on stdout}
+       puts stderr {hello on stderr}
+       exit 42
+    }
+    invoke [list tclsh <<$script]
+}]
+[call [fun lindex_resolve] [arg len] [arg index]]
+[para]Resolve an index which may be of the forms accepted by Tcl list commands such as end-2 or 2+2 to the actual integer index for the supplied list/string length
+[para]Users may define procs which accept a list/string index and wish to accept the forms understood by Tcl.
+[para]This means the proc may be called with something like $x+2  end-$y  etc
+[para]Sometimes the actual integer index is desired.
+[para]We want to resolve the index used, without passing arbitrary expressions into the 'expr' function - which could have security risks.
+[para]lindex_resolve will parse the index expression and return:
+[para] a) -3 if the supplied index expression is below the lower bound for the supplied list. (< 0)
+[para] b) -2 if the supplied index expression is above the upper bound for the supplied list. (> end)
+[para] We don't return -1 - as the similar function lindex_resolve_basic uses this to denote out of range at either end of the list/string
+[para]Otherwise it will return an integer corresponding to the position in the list.
+[para]This is in stark contrast to Tcl list function indices which will return empty strings for out of bounds indices, or in the case of lrange, return results anyway.
+[para]Like Tcl list commands - it will produce an error if the form of the index is not acceptable
+[para]For empty lists, end and end+x indices are considered to be out of bounds on the upper side - thus returning -2
+[call [fun lindex_resolve_basic] [arg len] [arg index]]
+[para] Accepts index of the forms accepted by Tcl's list commands. (e.g compound indices such as 3+1 end-2)
+[para] returns -1 for out of range at either end, or a valid integer index
+[para] Unlike lindex_resolve; lindex_resolve_basic can't determine if an out of range index was out of range at the lower or upper bound
+[para] This is only likely to be faster than average over lindex_resolve for small lists and for Tcl which has the builtin lseq command
+[para] The performance advantage is more likely to be present when using compound indexes such as $x+1 or end-1
+[para] For pure integer indices the performance should be equivalent
+[call [fun K] [arg x] [arg y]]
+[para]The K-combinator function - returns the first argument, x and discards y
+[para]see [uri https://wiki.tcl-lang.org/page/K]
+[para]It is used in cases where command-substitution at the calling-point performs some desired effect.
+[call [fun is_utf8_multibyteprefix] [arg str]]
+[para] Returns a boolean if str is potentially a prefix for a multibyte utf-8 character
+[para] ie - tests if it is possible that appending more data will result in a utf-8 codepoint
+[para] Will return false for an already complete utf-8 codepoint
+[para] It is assumed the incomplete sequence is at the beginning of the bytes argument
+[para] Suitable input for this might be from the unreturned tail portion of get_utf8_leading $testbytes
+[para] e.g using: set head [lb]get_utf8_leading $testbytes[rb] ; set tail [lb]string range $testbytes [lb]string length $head[rb] end[rb]
+[call [fun is_utf8_single] [arg 1234bytes]]
+[para] Tests input of 1,2,3 or 4 bytes and responds with a boolean indicating if it is a valid utf-8 character (codepoint)
+[call [fun get_utf8_leading] [arg rawbytes]]
+[para] return the leading portion of rawbytes that is a valid utf8 sequence.
+[para] This will stop at the point at which the bytes can't be interpreted as a complete utf-8 codepoint
+[para] e.g It will not return the first byte or 2 of a 3-byte utf-8 character if the last byte is missing, and will return only the valid utf-8 string from before the first byte of the incomplete character.
+[para] It will also only return the prefix before any bytes that cannot be part of a utf-8 sequence at all.
+[para] Note that while this will return valid utf8 - it has no knowledge of grapheme clusters or diacritics
+[para] This means if it is being used to process bytes split at some arbitrary point - the trailing data that isn't returned could be part of a grapheme cluster that belongs with the last character of the leading string already returned
+[para] The utf-8 BOM \xEF\xBB\xBF is a valid UTF8 3-byte sequence and so can also be returned as part of the leading utf8 bytes
+[call [fun hex2dec] [opt {option value...}] [arg list_largeHex]]
+[para]Convert a list of (possibly large) unprefixed hex strings to their decimal values
+[para]hex2dec accepts and ignores internal underscores in the same manner as Tcl 8.7+ numbers e.g  hex2dec FF_FF returns 65535
+[para]Leading and trailing underscores are ignored as a matter of implementation convenience - but this shouldn't be relied upon.
+[para]Leading or trailing whitespace in each list member is allowed e.g hex2dec " F" returns 15
+[para]Internal whitespace e.g "F F" is not permitted - but a completely empty element "" is allowed and will return 0
+[call [fun dex2hex] [opt {option value...}] [arg list_decimals]]
+[para]Convert a list of decimal integers to a list of hex values
+[para] -width <int> can be used to make each hex value at least int characters wide, with leading zeroes.
+[para] -case upper|lower determines the case of the hex letters in the output
+[call [fun log2] [arg x]]
+[para]log base2 of x
+[para]This uses a 'live' proc body - the divisor for the change of base is computed once at definition time
+[para](courtesy of RS [uri https://wiki.tcl-lang.org/page/Additional+math+functions])
+[call [fun logbase] [arg b] [arg x]]
+[para]log base b of x
+[para]This function uses expr's natural log and the change of base division.
+[para]This means for example that we can get results like: logbase 10 1000 = 2.9999999999999996
+[para]Use expr's log10() function or tcl::mathfunc::log10 for base 10
+[call [fun factors] [arg x]]
+[para]Return a sorted list of the positive factors of x where x > 0
+[para]For x = 0 we return only 0 and 1 as technically any number divides zero and there are an infinite number of factors. (including zero itself in this context)*
+[para]This is a simple brute-force implementation that iterates all numbers below the square root of x to check the factors
+[para]Because the implementation is so simple - the performance is very reasonable for numbers below at least a few 10's of millions
+[para]See tcllib math::numtheory::factors for a more complex implementation - which seems to be slower for 'small' numbers
+[para]Comparisons were done with some numbers below 17 digits long
+[para]For seriously big numbers - this simple algorithm would no doubt be outperformed by more complex algorithms.
+[para]The numtheory library stores some data about primes etc with each call - so may become faster when being used on more numbers
+but has the disadvantage of being slower for 'small' numbers and using more memory.
+[para]If the largest factor below x is needed - the greatestOddFactorBelow and GreatestFactorBelow functions are a faster way to get there than computing the whole list, even for small values of x
+[para]* Taking x=0; Notion of x being divisible by integer y being: There exists an integer p such that x = py
+[para]  In other mathematical contexts zero may be considered not to divide anything.
+[call [fun oddFactors] [arg x]]
+[para]Return a list of odd integer factors of x, sorted in ascending order
+[call [fun greatestFactorBelow] [arg x]]
+[para]Return the largest factor of x excluding itself
+[para]factor functions can be useful for console layout calculations
+[para]See Tcllib math::numtheory for more extensive implementations
+[call [fun greatestOddFactorBelow] [arg x]]
+[para]Return the largest odd integer factor of x excluding x itself
+[call [fun greatestOddFactor] [arg x]]
+[para]Return the largest odd integer factor of x
+[para]For an odd value of x - this will always return x
+[call [fun gcd] [arg n] [arg m]]
+[para]Return the greatest common divisor of m and n
+[para]Straight from Lars Hellström's math::numtheory library  in Tcllib
+[para]Graphical use:
+[para]An a by b rectangle can be covered with square tiles of side-length c,
+[para]only if c is a common divisor of a and b
+[call [fun gcd] [arg n] [arg m]]
+[para]Return the lowest common multiple of m and n
+[para]Straight from Lars Hellström's math::numtheory library  in Tcllib
+[para]
+[call [fun commonDivisors] [arg x] [arg y]]
+[para]Return a list of all the common factors of x and y
+[para](equivalent to factors of their gcd)
+[call [fun hasglobs] [arg str]]
+[para]Return a boolean indicating whether str contains any of the glob characters: * ? [lb] [rb]
+[para]hasglobs uses append to preserve Tcls internal representation for str - so it should help avoid shimmering in the few cases where this may matter.
+[call [fun trimzero] [arg number]]
+[para]Return number with left-hand-side zeros trimmed off - unless all zero
+[para]If number is all zero - a single 0 is returned
+[call [fun substring_count] [arg str] [arg substring]]
+[para]Search str and return number of occurrences of substring
+[call [fun dict_merge_ordered] [arg defaults] [arg main]]
+[para]The standard dict merge accepts multiple dicts with values from dicts to the right (2nd argument) taking precedence.
+[para]When merging with a dict of default values - this means that any default key/vals that weren't in the main dict appear in the output before the main data.
+[para]This function merges the two dicts whilst maintaining the key order of main followed by defaults.
+[call [fun askuser] [arg question]]
+[para]A basic utility to read an answer from stdin
+[para]The prompt is written to the terminal and then it waits for a user to type something
+[para]stdin is temporarily configured to blocking and then put back in its original state in case it wasn't already so.
+[para]If the terminal is using punk::console and is in raw mode - the terminal will temporarily be put in line mode.
+[para](Generic terminal raw vs linemode detection not yet present)
+[para]The user must hit enter to submit the response
+[para]The return value is the string if any that was typed prior to hitting enter.
+[para]The question argument can be manually colourised using the various punk::ansi funcitons
+[example_begin]
+   set answer [lb]punk::lib::askuser "[lb]a+ green bold[rb]Do you want to proceed? (Y|N)[lb]a[rb]"[rb]
+   if {[lb]string match y* [lb]string tolower $answer[rb][rb]} {
+       puts "Proceeding"
+   } else {
+       puts "Cancelled by user"
+   }
+[example_end]
+[call [fun linesort] [opt {sortoption ?val?...}] [arg textblock]]
+[para]Sort lines in textblock
+[para]Returns another textblock with lines sorted
+[para]options are flags as accepted by lsort ie -ascii -command -decreasing -dictionary -index -indices -integer -nocase -real -stride -unique
+[call [fun list_as_lines] [opt {-joinchar char}] [arg linelist]]
+[para]This simply joins the elements of the list with -joinchar
+[para]It is mainly intended for use in pipelines where the primary argument comes at the end - but it can also be used as a general replacement for join $lines <le>
+[para]The sister function lines_as_list takes a block of text and splits it into lines - but with more options related to trimming the block and/or each line.
+[call [fun lines_as_list] [opt {option value ...}] [arg text]]
+[para]Returns a list of possibly trimmed lines depeding on options
+[para]The concept of lines is raw lines from splitting on newline after crlf is mapped to lf
+[para]- not console lines which may be entirely different due to control characters such as vertical tabs or ANSI movements
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::lib::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::lib::system ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_libunknown-0.1.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::libunknown 0 0.1]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::libunknown]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::libunknown
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::libunknown
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::libunknown}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::libunknown
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::libunknown ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_netbox-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::netbox 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::netbox]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::netbox
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::netbox
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package {http}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+[section Internal]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::netbox
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::netbox ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::netbox::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_packagepreference-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace punk::packagepreference::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }
@@ -35,6 +36,7 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [para]Return to the previous ::package implementation (This will be the builtin if no other override was present when install was called)
 [call [fun install]]
 [para]Override ::package builtin (or the current implementation if it has already been renamed/overridden) to check for and prefer lowercase packages/modules
+[para](todo - check info loaded and restrict to existing version as determined from dll/so?)
 [para]The overriding package command will call whatever implementation was in place before install to do the actual work - once it has modified 'package require' names to lowercase.
 [para]This is intended to be in alignment with tip 590 "Recommend lowercase Package Names"
 [para] https://core.tcl-lang.org/tips/doc/trunk/tip/590.md
@@ -49,7 +51,6 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [list_begin definitions]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::packagepreference::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
-tcl::namespace::eval punk::packagepreference::system {
 [subsection {Namespace punk::packagepreference::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_path-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -17,11 +17,13 @@
 [para] packages used by punk::path
 [list_begin itemized]
 [item] [package {Tcl 8.6-}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
 [list_end]
 [section API]
 [subsection {Namespace punk::path::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[info commands [namespace current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }

src/doc/punk/_module_pcon-1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::pcon 0 1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::pcon]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::pcon
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::pcon
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pcon::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pcon}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::pcon
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::pcon ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pcon::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::pcon::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::pcon::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pcon::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_pipe-1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::pipe 0 1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::pipe]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::pipe
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::pipe
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pipe::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pipe}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::pipe
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::pipe ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pipe::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::pipe::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::pipe::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace punk::pipe::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_rest-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace punk::rest::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }
@@ -37,6 +38,7 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::rest::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::rest::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace punk::rest::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_safe-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -20,14 +20,6 @@
 [item] [package {punk::args}]
 [list_end]
 [section API]
-[subsection {Namespace punk::safe::class}]
-[para] class definitions
-if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
-[list_begin enumerated]
-[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
-}
-}
- ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
 [subsection {Namespace punk::safe::lib}]
 [para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
 [list_begin definitions]

src/doc/punk/_module_sixel-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -23,14 +23,6 @@
 [item] [package {punk::ansi}]
 [list_end]
 [section API]
-[subsection {Namespace punk::sixel::class}]
-[para] class definitions
-if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
-[list_begin enumerated]
-[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
-}
-}
- ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
 [subsection {Namespace punk::sixel}]
 [para] Core API functions for punk::sixel
 [list_begin definitions]

src/doc/punk/_module_trie-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -34,6 +34,7 @@
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::trie::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::trie::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace punk::trie::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_winlnk-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -24,6 +24,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace punk::winlnk::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }
@@ -45,6 +46,7 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::winlnk::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::winlnk::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace punk::winlnk::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_winshell-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::winshell 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::winshell]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::winshell
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::winshell
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::winshell::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+[subsection {Namespace punk::winshell}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::winshell
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::winshell ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::winshell::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::winshell::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::winshell::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace punk::winshell::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/_module_zip-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
-[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
-[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
-[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::zip 0 0.1.0]
-[copyright "2024"]
-[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
-[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
-[require punk::zip]
-[keywords module]
-[description]
-[para] -
-[section Overview]
-[para] overview of punk::zip
-[subsection Concepts]
-[para] -
-[subsection dependencies]
-[para] packages used by punk::zip
-[list_begin itemized]
-[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
-[item] [package {punk::args}]
-[list_end]
-[section API]
-[subsection {Namespace punk::zip::class}]
-[para] class definitions
-if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
-[list_begin enumerated]
-[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
-}
-}
- ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
-[subsection {Namespace punk::zip}]
-[para] Core API functions for punk::zip
-[list_begin definitions]
-[call [fun Timet_to_dos] [arg time_t]]
-[para] convert a unix timestamp into a DOS timestamp for ZIP times.
-[example {
-   DOS timestamps are 32 bits split into bit regions as follows:
-                  24                16                 8                 0
-   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
-   |Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|m| |m|m|m|d|d|d|d|d| |h|h|h|h|h|m|m|m| |m|m|m|s|s|s|s|s|
-   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
-}]
-[call [fun walk] [arg ?options?] [arg base]]
-[para] Walk a directory tree rooted at base
-[para] the -excludes list can be a set of glob expressions to match against files and avoid
-[para] e.g
-[example {
-  punk::zip::walk -exclude {CVS/* *~.#*} library
-}]
-[call [fun Mkzipfile] [arg zipchan] [arg base] [arg path] [arg ?comment?]]
-[para] Add a single file to a zip archive
-[para] The zipchan channel should already be open and binary.
-[para] You can provide a -comment for the file.
-[para] The return value is the central directory record that will need to be used when finalizing the zip archive.
-[call [fun mkzip] [arg ?options?] [arg filename]]
-[para] Create a zip archive in 'filename'
-[para] If a file already exists, an error will be raised.
-[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::zip ---}]
-[subsection {Namespace punk::zip::lib}]
-[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
-[list_begin definitions]
-[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::zip::lib ---}]
-[section Internal]
-tcl::namespace::eval punk::zip::system {
-[subsection {Namespace punk::zip::system}]
-[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
-[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/ansi/_module_colourmap-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_::punk::ansi::colourmap 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require ::punk::ansi::colourmap]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of ::punk::ansi::colourmap
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by ::punk::ansi::colourmap
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace ::punk::ansi::colourmap}]
+[para] Core API functions for ::punk::ansi::colourmap
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace ::punk::ansi::colourmap ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace ::punk::ansi::colourmap::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace ::punk::ansi::colourmap::lib ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/args/_module_tclcore-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -18,16 +18,9 @@
 [list_begin itemized]
 [item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
 [item] [package {punk::args}]
+[item] [package {textblock}]
 [list_end]
 [section API]
-[subsection {Namespace punk::args::tclcore::class}]
-[para] class definitions
-if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
-[list_begin enumerated]
-[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
-}
-}
- ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
 [subsection {Namespace punk::args::tclcore}]
 [para] Core API functions for punk::args::tclcore
 [list_begin definitions]
@@ -38,6 +31,7 @@ if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
 [list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::args::tclcore::lib ---}]
 [section Internal]
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::args::tclcore::system {
+*** !doctools
 [subsection {Namespace punk::args::tclcore::system}]
 [para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
 [manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/args/_module_tkcore-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::args::tkcore 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::args::tkcore]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::args::tkcore
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::args::tkcore
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package {punk::args}]
+[item] [package {textblock}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::args::tkcore}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::args::tkcore
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::args::tkcore ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::args::tkcore::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::args::tkcore::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::args::tkcore::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace punk::args::tkcore::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/args/_module_tzint-1.1.1.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::args::tzint 0 1.1.1]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::args::tzint]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::args::tzint
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::args::tzint
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::args::tzint}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::args::tzint
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::args::tzint ---}]
+[manpage_end]

src/doc/punk/mix/commandset/_module_project-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ create minimal folder structure only by specifying in args:  -modules {}
 [para] commandset functions for operating with multiple projects.
 [para] It would usually be imported with the prefix "projects" and separator "." to result in commands such as: <ensemblecommand> projects.detail
 [list_begin definitions]
-[call [fun _default] [arg glob] [opt {option value...}]]
+[call [fun _default] [arg glob...]]
 [para]List projects under fossil management, showing fossil db location and number of checkouts
 [para]The glob argument is optional unless option/value pairs are also supplied, in which case * should be explicitly supplied
 [para]glob restricts output based on the name of the fossil db file e.g s* for all projects beginning with s

src/doc/punk/nav/_module_fs-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -27,6 +27,7 @@
 [subsection {Namespace punk::nav::fs::class}]
 [para] class definitions
 if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 [list_begin enumerated]
 [list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
 }

src/doc/punk/netbox/_module_man-0.1.0.tm.man

@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+[comment {--- punk::docgen generated from inline doctools comments ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen DO NOT EDIT DOCS HERE UNLESS YOU REMOVE THESE COMMENT LINES ---}]
+[comment {--- punk::docgen overwrites this file ---}]
+[manpage_begin shellspy_module_punk::netbox::man 0 0.1.0]
+[copyright "2025"]
+[titledesc {Module API}]  [comment {-- Name section and table of contents description --}]
+[moddesc {-}]             [comment {-- Description at end of page heading --}]
+[require punk::netbox::man]
+[keywords module]
+[description]
+[para] -
+[section Overview]
+[para] overview of punk::netbox::man
+[subsection Concepts]
+[para] -
+[subsection dependencies]
+[para] packages used by punk::netbox::man
+[list_begin itemized]
+[item] [package {Tcl 8.6}]
+[item] [package {punk::netbox}]
+[list_end]
+[section API]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::man::class}]
+[para] class definitions
+if {[tcl::info::commands [tcl::namespace::current]::interface_sample1] eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+[list_begin enumerated]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end class enumeration ---}]
+}
+}
+ ++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::man}]
+[para] Core API functions for punk::netbox::man
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::netbox::man ---}]
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::man::lib}]
+[para] Secondary functions that are part of the API
+[list_begin definitions]
+[list_end] [comment {--- end definitions namespace punk::netbox::man::lib ---}]
+[section Internal]
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::netbox::man::system {
+*** !doctools
+[subsection {Namespace punk::netbox::man::system}]
+[para] Internal functions that are not part of the API
+[manpage_end]

src/embedded/man/files/_module_argparsingtest-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_argparsingtest \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBargparsingtest \fR
+package require \fBargparsingtest\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/_module_fauxlink-0.1.1.tm.n

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 '\" Generated from file '_module_fauxlink-0\&.1\&.1\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
 '\" Copyright (c) 2024
 '\"
-.TH "fauxlink_module_fauxlink" 0 0\&.1\&.1 doc "fauxlink \&.fxlnk"
+.TH "fauxlink_module_fauxlink" 0 0\&.1\&.1 doc "\&.fauxlink \&.fxlnk"
 .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
 .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
 .\"
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 fauxlink_module_fauxlink \- faux link application shortcuts
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBfauxlink \fR
+package require \fBfauxlink\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -289,10 +289,12 @@ archiving and packaging systems\&.
 .PP
 The target is specified in a minimally-encoded form in the filename itself - but still human readable\&.
 .PP
-format of name <nominalname>#<encodedtarget>\&.fxlnk
+format of name <nominalname>#<encodedtarget>\&.fauxlink
 .PP
 where <nominalname> can be empty - then the effective nominal name is the tail of the <encodedtarget>
 .PP
+The file extension must be \&.fauxlink or \&.fxlnk
+.PP
 The + symbol substitutes for forward-slashes\&.
 .PP
 Other chars can be encoded using url-like encoding - (but only up to %7E !)
@@ -305,13 +307,13 @@ e\&.g if an actual + or # is required in a filename or path segment they can be
 .PP
 e\&.g a link to a file file#A\&.txt in parent dir could be:
 .PP
-file%23A\&.txt#\&.\&.+file%23A\&.txt\&.fxlnk
+file%23A\&.txt#\&.\&.+file%23A\&.txt\&.fauxlink
 .PP
-or equivalently (but obviously affecting sorting) #\&.\&.+file%23A\&.txt\&.fxlnk
+or equivalently (but obviously affecting sorting) #\&.\&.+file%23A\&.txt\&.fauxlink
 .PP
 The <nominalname> can be unrelated to the actual target
 .PP
-e\&.g datafile\&.dat#\&.\&.+file%23A\&.txt\&.fxlnk
+e\&.g datafile\&.dat#\&.\&.+file%23A\&.txt\&.fauxlink
 .PP
 This system has no filesystem support - and must be completely application driven\&.
 .PP

src/embedded/man/files/_module_modpod-0.1.2.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 modpod_module_modpod \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBmodpod \fR
+package require \fBmodpod\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/_module_modpod-0.1.3.tm.n

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 '\"
-'\" Generated from file '_module_textblock-0\&.1\&.1\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Generated from file '_module_modpod-0\&.1\&.3\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
 '\" Copyright (c) 2024
 '\"
-.TH "punkshell_module_textblock" 0 0\&.1\&.1 doc "punk textblock"
+.TH "modpod_module_modpod" 0 0\&.1\&.3 doc "-"
 .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
 .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
 .\"
@@ -272,71 +272,45 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 ..
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-punkshell_module_textblock \- punk textblock functions
+modpod_module_modpod \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBtextblock \fR
+package require \fBmodpod\fR
-.sp
-class::table \fBconstructor\fR \fIargs\fR
-.sp
-class::table \fBadd_column\fR \fIargs\fR
-.sp
-class::table \fBadd_row\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-Ansi-aware terminal textblock manipulation
+-
 .SH OVERVIEW
 .PP
-overview of textblock
+overview of modpod
 .SS CONCEPTS
 .PP
+-
 .SS DEPENDENCIES
 .PP
-packages used by textblock
+packages used by modpod
 .IP \(bu
 \fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBpunk::args\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBpunk::char\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBpunk::ansi\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBpunk::lib\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBovertype\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBterm::ansi::code::macros\fR
-.IP \(bu
-\fBtextutil\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
-.SS "NAMESPACE TEXTBLOCK::CLASS"
+.SS "NAMESPACE MODPOD::CLASS"
 .PP
 class definitions
-.IP \(bu
-.sp
-\fIhandler_classes\fR
-.RS
-.IP [1]
-CLASS \fBtextblock::class::table\fR
-.RS
-.sp
-\fIMETHODS\fR
-.TP
-class::table \fBconstructor\fR \fIargs\fR
-.TP
-class::table \fBadd_column\fR \fIargs\fR
-.TP
-class::table \fBadd_row\fR \fIargs\fR
-.RE
-.RE
 .PP
-Already uniform blocks will join faster than textblock::join, and ragged blocks will join in a ragged manner
+.SS "NAMESPACE MODPOD"
-"
+.PP
+Core API functions for modpod
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE MODPOD::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+.SS "NAMESPACE MODPOD::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
 .SH KEYWORDS
-lib, module, utility
+module
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 .nf
 Copyright (c) 2024

src/embedded/man/files/_module_overtype-1.6.5.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 overtype_module_overtype \- overtype text layout - ansi aware
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBovertype \fR
+package require \fBovertype\fR
 .sp
 \fBovertype::renderspace\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/_module_overtype-1.6.6.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,354 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_overtype-1\&.6\&.6\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2024
+'\"
+.TH "overtype_module_overtype" 0 1\&.6\&.6 doc "overtype text layout"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+overtype_module_overtype \- overtype text layout - ansi aware
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBovertype\fR
+.sp
+\fBovertype::renderspace\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+\fBovertype::renderline\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of overtype
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by overtype
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBtextutil\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::ansi\fR
+.sp
+- required to detect, split, strip and calculate lengths of text possibly containing ansi codes
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::char\fR
+.sp
+- box drawing - and also unicode character width determination for proper layout of text with double-column-width chars
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE OVERTYPE"
+.PP
+Core API functions for overtype
+.TP
+\fBovertype::renderspace\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+usage: ?-transparent [0|1]? ?-expand_right [1|0]? ?-ellipsis [1|0]? ?-ellipsistext \&.\&.\&.? undertext overtext
+.TP
+\fBovertype::renderline\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+renderline is the core engine for overtype string processing (frames & textblocks), and the raw mode commandline repl for the Tcl Punk Shell
+.sp
+It is also a central part of an ansi (micro) virtual terminal-emulator of sorts
+.sp
+This system does a half decent job at rendering 90's ANSI art to manipulable colour text blocks that can be joined & framed for layout display within a unix or windows terminal
+.sp
+Renderline helps maintain ANSI text styling reset/replay codes so that the styling of one block doesn't affect another\&.
+.sp
+Calling on the punk::ansi library - it can coalesce codes to keep the size down\&.
+.sp
+It is a giant mess of doing exactly what common wisdom says not to do\&.\&.\&. lots at once\&.
+.sp
+renderline is part of the Unicode and ANSI aware Overtype system which 'renders' a block of text onto a static underlay
+.sp
+The underlay is generally expected to be an ordered set of lines or a rectangular text block analogous to a terminal screen - but it can also be ragged in line length, or just blank\&.
+.sp
+The overlay couuld be similar - in which case it may often be used to overwrite a column or section of the underlay\&.
+.sp
+The overlay could however be a sequence of ANSI-laden text that jumps all over the place\&.
+.sp
+renderline itself only deals with a single line - or sometimes a single character\&.  It is generally called from a loop that does further terminal-like or textblock processing\&.
+.sp
+By suppyling the -info 1 option - it can return various fields indicating the state of the render\&.
+.sp
+The main 3 are the result, overflow_right, and unapplied\&.
+.sp
+Renderline handles cursor movements from either keystrokes or ANSI sequences but for a full system the aforementioned loop will need to be in place to manage the set of lines under manipulation\&.
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+ansi, module, text
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2024
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/_module_picalc-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_picalc-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_picalc" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_picalc \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpicalc\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of picalc
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by picalc
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::lib\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::args\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PICALC"
+.PP
+Core API functions for picalc
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PICALC::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/_module_pipe-1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_pipe-1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_pipe" 0 1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_pipe \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpipe\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of pipe
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by pipe
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PIPE::CLASS"
+.PP
+class definitions
+if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+.PP
+}
+}
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+.SS "NAMESPACE PIPE"
+.PP
+Core API functions for pipe
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PIPE::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+tcl::namespace::eval pipe::system {
+*** !doctools
+.SS "NAMESPACE PIPE::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/_module_poshinfo-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_poshinfo \- poshinfo prompt theme tool
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBposhinfo \fR
+package require \fBposhinfo\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/_module_termscheme-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 shellspy_module_termscheme \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBtermscheme \fR
+package require \fBtermscheme\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -297,6 +297,7 @@ packages used by termscheme
 .PP
 class definitions
 if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 .PP
 }
 }
@@ -311,6 +312,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval termscheme::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE TERMSCHEME::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/_module_textblock-0.1.3.tm.n

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 '\"
-'\" Generated from file '_module_textblock-0\&.1\&.2\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Generated from file '_module_textblock-0\&.1\&.3\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
 '\" Copyright (c) 2024
 '\"
-.TH "punkshell_module_textblock" 0 0\&.1\&.2 doc "punk textblock"
+.TH "punkshell_module_textblock" 0 0\&.1\&.3 doc "punk textblock"
 .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
 .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
 .\"
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_textblock \- punk textblock functions
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBtextblock \fR
+package require \fBtextblock\fR
 .sp
 class::table \fBconstructor\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Show the colspans configured for all headers
 .TP
 class::table \fBconfigure_header\fR
 .sp
-- undocumented
+- configure header row-wise
 .TP
 class::table \fBadd_row\fR \fIvaluelist\fR ?\fB-minheight\fR \fIint_minheight\fR? ?\fB-maxheight\fR \fIint_maxheight\fR? ?\fB-ansibase\fR \fIansicode\fR?
 .TP
@@ -499,10 +499,6 @@ If the original cell data itself contains ANSI - the output will still contain t
 .RE
 .RE
 .PP
-Already uniform blocks will join faster than textblock::join, and ragged blocks will join in a ragged manner
-"
-Already uniform blocks will join faster than textblock::join, and ragged blocks will join in a ragged manner
-"
 .SH KEYWORDS
 ansi, colour, console, frame, layout, module, table, terminal, text
 .SH COPYRIGHT

src/embedded/man/files/_module_tomlish-1.1.2.tm.n

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 '\"
-'\" Generated from file '_module_tomlish-1\&.1\&.1\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Generated from file '_module_tomlish-1\&.1\&.2\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
 '\" Copyright (c) 2024
 '\"
-.TH "tomlish_module_tomlish" 0 1\&.1\&.1 doc "tomlish"
+.TH "tomlish_module_tomlish" 0 1\&.1\&.2 doc "tomlish"
 .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
 .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
 .\"
@@ -274,11 +274,11 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 tomlish_module_tomlish \- tomlish toml parser
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBtomlish \fR
+package require \fBtomlish\fR
 .sp
 \fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
 .sp
-\fBtoml\fR \fIs\fR
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
 .sp
 app::\fBdecoder\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Core API functions for tomlish
 .SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::DECODE"
 .PP
 .TP
-\fBtoml\fR \fIs\fR
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
 .sp
 return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
 .PP

src/embedded/man/files/_module_tomlish-1.1.3.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_tomlish-1\&.1\&.3\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2024
+'\"
+.TH "tomlish_module_tomlish" 0 1\&.1\&.3 doc "tomlish"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+tomlish_module_tomlish \- tomlish toml parser
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBtomlish\fR
+.sp
+\fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
+.sp
+app::\fBdecoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+app::\fBencoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+.PP
+The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+.PP
+The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+.PP
+although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+.PP
+The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e\&.g \\t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable\&.
+.PP
+A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments\&.
+.PP
+e\&.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+.PP
+The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+.PP
+e\&.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+.PP
+will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int\&.
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of tomlish
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by tomlish
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBstruct::stack\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH"
+.PP
+Core API functions for tomlish
+.TP
+\fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::ENCODE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::DECODE"
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
+.sp
+return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::UTILS"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::PARSE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::APP"
+.PP
+.TP
+app::\fBdecoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+read toml on stdin until EOF
+.sp
+on error   - returns non-zero exit code and writes error on stderr
+.sp
+on success - returns zero exit code and writes JSON encoding of the data on stdout
+.sp
+This decoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+.TP
+app::\fBencoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+read JSON on stdin until EOF
+.sp
+return non-zero exitcode if JSON data cannot be converted to a valid TOML representation
+.sp
+return zero exitcode and TOML data on stdout if JSON data can be converted\&.
+.sp
+This encoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+configuration, module, parsing, toml
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2024
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/_module_tomlish-1.1.4.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_tomlish-1\&.1\&.4\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2024
+'\"
+.TH "tomlish_module_tomlish" 0 1\&.1\&.4 doc "tomlish"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+tomlish_module_tomlish \- tomlish toml parser
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBtomlish\fR
+.sp
+\fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
+.sp
+app::\fBdecoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+app::\fBencoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+.PP
+The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+.PP
+The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+.PP
+although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+.PP
+The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e\&.g \\t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable\&.
+.PP
+A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments\&.
+.PP
+e\&.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+.PP
+The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+.PP
+e\&.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+.PP
+will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int\&.
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of tomlish
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by tomlish
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBstruct::stack\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH"
+.PP
+Core API functions for tomlish
+.TP
+\fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::ENCODE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::DECODE"
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
+.sp
+return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::UTILS"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::PARSE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::APP"
+.PP
+.TP
+app::\fBdecoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+read toml on stdin until EOF
+.sp
+on error   - returns non-zero exit code and writes error on stderr
+.sp
+on success - returns zero exit code and writes JSON encoding of the data on stdout
+.sp
+This decoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+.TP
+app::\fBencoder\fR \fIargs\fR
+.sp
+read JSON on stdin until EOF
+.sp
+return non-zero exitcode if JSON data cannot be converted to a valid TOML representation
+.sp
+return zero exitcode and TOML data on stdout if JSON data can be converted\&.
+.sp
+This encoder is intended to be compatible with toml-test
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+configuration, module, parsing, toml
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2024
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/_module_tomlish-1.1.5.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,356 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_tomlish-1\&.1\&.5\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2024
+'\"
+.TH "tomlish_module_tomlish" 0 1\&.1\&.5 doc "tomlish"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+tomlish_module_tomlish \- tomlish toml parser
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBtomlish\fR
+.sp
+\fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+.PP
+The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+.PP
+The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+.PP
+although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+.PP
+The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e\&.g \\t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable\&.
+.PP
+A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments\&.
+.PP
+e\&.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+.PP
+The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+.PP
+e\&.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+.PP
+will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int\&.
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of tomlish
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by tomlish
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBstruct::stack\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH"
+.PP
+Core API functions for tomlish
+.TP
+\fBjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::ENCODE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::DECODE"
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBtoml\fR \fIarg\&.\&.\&.\fR
+.sp
+return a Tcl list of tomlish tokens
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::UTILS"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::PARSE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::APP"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+configuration, module, parsing, toml
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2024
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/_module_tomlish-1.1.6.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,369 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_tomlish-1\&.1\&.6\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2024
+'\"
+.TH "tomlish_module_tomlish" 0 1\&.1\&.6 doc "tomlish"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+tomlish_module_tomlish \- tomlish toml parser
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBtomlish\fR
+.sp
+\fBtypedjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+\fBlindex_resolve_basic\fR \fIlist\fR \fIindex\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+tomlish is an intermediate representation of toml data in a tree structure (tagged lists representing type information)
+.PP
+The design goals are for tomlish to be whitespace and comment preserving ie byte-for byte preservation during roundtrips from toml to tomlish and back to toml
+.PP
+The tomlish representation can then be converted to a Tcl dict structure or to other formats such as json,
+.PP
+although these other formats are generally unlikely to retain whitespace or comments
+.PP
+The other formats also won't preserve roundtripability e\&.g \\t and a literal tab coming from a toml file will be indistinguishable\&.
+.PP
+A further goal is to allow at least a useful subset of in-place editing operations which also preserve whitespace and comments\&.
+.PP
+e\&.g leaf key value editing, and table reordering/sorting, key-renaming at any level, key insertions/deletions
+.PP
+The API for editing (tomldoc object?) may require explicit setting of type if accessing an existing key
+.PP
+e\&.g setting a key that already exists and is a different type (especially if nested structure such as a table or array)
+.PP
+will need a -type option (-force ?) to force overriding with another type such as an int\&.
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of tomlish
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by tomlish
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBstruct::stack\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH"
+.PP
+Core API functions for tomlish
+.TP
+\fBtypedjson_to_toml\fR \fIjson\fR
+.sp
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::ENCODE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::DECODE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::UTILS"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::PARSE"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::APP"
+.PP
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE TOMLISH::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+.TP
+\fBlindex_resolve_basic\fR \fIlist\fR \fIindex\fR
+.sp
+Accepts index of the forms accepted by Tcl's list commands\&. (e\&.g compound indices such as 3+1 end-2)
+.sp
+returns -1 for out of range at either end, or a valid integer index
+.sp
+Unlike lindex_resolve; lindex_resolve_basic can't determine if an out of range index was out of range at the lower or upper bound
+.sp
+This is only likely to be faster than average over lindex_resolve for Tcl which has the builtin lseq command
+.sp
+The performance advantage is more likely to be present when using compound indexes such as $x+1 or end-1
+.sp
+For pure integer indices the performance should be equivalent
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+configuration, module, parsing, toml
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2024
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/main.n

@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell \- punkshell - Core
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBTcl  8\&.6\fR
+package require \fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/project_changes.n

@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell__project_changes \- punkshell Changes
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBTcl  8\&.6\fR
+package require \fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/project_intro.n

@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell__project_intro \- Introduction to punkshell
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBTcl  8\&.6\fR
+package require \fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_aliascore-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::aliascore \- punkshell command aliases
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::aliascore \fR
+package require \fBpunk::aliascore\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_ansi-0.1.1.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::ansi \- Ansi string functions
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::ansi \fR
+package require \fBpunk::ansi\fR
 .sp
 \fBa?\fR ?ansicode\&.\&.\&.?
 .sp
@@ -306,6 +306,8 @@ package require \fBpunk::ansi \fR
 .sp
 \fBmove_emitblock\fR \fIrow\fR \fIcol\fR \fItextblock\fR
 .sp
+\fBmove_emitblock\fR \fIrow\fR \fIcol\fR \fItextblock\fR
+.sp
 \fBmove_forward\fR \fIn\fR
 .sp
 \fBmove_back\fR \fIn\fR
@@ -516,6 +518,8 @@ A string created by any move_emit_return for punk::ansi would not behave in an i
 .TP
 \fBmove_emitblock\fR \fIrow\fR \fIcol\fR \fItextblock\fR
 .TP
+\fBmove_emitblock\fR \fIrow\fR \fIcol\fR \fItextblock\fR
+.TP
 \fBmove_forward\fR \fIn\fR
 .TP
 \fBmove_back\fR \fIn\fR

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_args-0.2.tm.n

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 '\"
-'\" Generated from file '_module_args-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Generated from file '_module_args-0\&.2\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
 '\" Copyright (c) 2024
 '\"
-.TH "punkshell_module_punk::args" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "args to nested dict of opts and values"
+.TH "punkshell_module_punk::args" 0 0\&.2 doc "args to nested dict of opts and values"
 .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
 .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
 .\"
@@ -274,9 +274,9 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::args \- args parsing
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::args \fR
+package require \fBpunk::args\fR
 .sp
-\fBget_dict\fR \fIoptionspecs\fR \fIrawargs\fR
+\fBget_dict\fR \fIdeflist\fR \fIrawargs\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -311,21 +311,21 @@ proc dostuff {arg1 arg2 args} {\&.\&.\&.}}
 but having the core values elements at the end of args is arguably more generally useful - especially in cases where the number of trailing values is unknown and/or the proc is to be called in a functional 'pipeline' style\&.
 .PP
 .PP
-The basic principle is that a call to punk::args::get_dict is made near the beginning of the proc with a cacheable first argument defining the parameters e\&.g
+The basic principle is that a call to punk::args::parse is made near the beginning of the proc with a cacheable argument defining the parameters e\&.g
 .CS
 
 
    proc dofilestuff {args} {
-       lassign [dict values [punk::args::get_dict {
+       lassign [dict values [punk::args::parse $args withdef {
-           *proc -help "do some stuff with files e\&.g dofilestuff <file1> <file2> <file3>"
+           @cmd -help "do some stuff with files e\&.g dofilestuff <file1> <file2> <file3>"
-           *opts -type string
+           @opts -type string
            #comment lines ok
            -directory   -default ""
            -translation -default binary
            #setting -type none indicates a flag that doesn't take a value (solo flag)
            -nocomplain -type none
-           *values -min 1 -max -1
+           @values -min 1 -max -1
-       } $args]] leaders opts values
+       }]] leaders opts values
 
        puts "translation is [dict get $opts -translation]"
        foreach f [dict values $values] {
@@ -335,42 +335,45 @@ The basic principle is that a call to punk::args::get_dict is made near the begi
 
 .CE
 .PP
-The lines beginning with * are optional in most cases and can be used to set defaults and some extra controls
+The lines beginning with @ are usually optional in most cases and can be used to set defaults and some extra controls
 .PP
-- the above example would work just fine with only the -<optionname> lines, but would allow zero filenames to be supplied as no -min value is set for *values
+- the above example would work just fine with only the -<optionname> lines, but would allow zero filenames to be supplied as no -min value is set for @values
 .PP
-valid * lines being with *proc *leaders *opts *values
+valid @ lines being with @cmd @leaders @opts @values
 .PP
 lines beginning with a dash define options - a name can optionally be given to each trailing positional argument\&.
 .PP
 If no names are defined for positional arguments, they will end up in the values key of the dict with numerical keys starting at zero\&.
 .PP
-e\&.g the result from the punk::args call above may be something like:
+e\&.g the result from the punk::args::parse call above may be something like:
 .PP
-opts {-translation binary -directory "" -nocomplain 0} values {0 file1\&.txt 1 file2\&.txt 2 file3\&.txt}
+leaders {} opts {-translation binary -directory "" -nocomplain 0} values {0 file1\&.txt 1 file2\&.txt 2 file3\&.txt}
 .PP
 Here is an example that requires the number of values supplied to be exactly 2 and names the positional arguments
 .PP
 It also demonstrates an inital argument 'category' that is outside of the scope for punk::args processing - allowing leading and trailing positional arguments
+.PP
+This could also be implemented entirely using args - and the @leaders category of arguments
 .CS
 
 
    proc dofilestuff {category args} {
-       lassign [dict values [punk::args::get_dict {
+       lassign [dict values [punk::args::parse $args withdef {
+            @id -id ::dofilestuff
            -directory   -default ""
            -translation -default binary
            -nocomplain -type none
-           *values -min 2 -max 2
+           @values -min 2 -max 2
             fileA -type existingfile 1
             fileB -type existingfile 1
-       } $args]] leaders opts values
+       }]] leaders opts values
        puts "$category fileA: [dict get $values fileA]"
        puts "$category fileB: [dict get $values fileB]"
    }
 
 .CE
 .PP
-By using standard tcl proc named arguments prior to args, and setting *values -min 0 -max 0
+By using standard tcl proc named arguments prior to args, and setting @values -min 0 -max 0
 .PP
 a Tk-style ordering can be acheived, where punk::args is only handling the trailing flags and the values element of the returned dict can be ignored
 .PP
@@ -380,10 +383,10 @@ or an additional call could be made to punk::args e\&.g
 .CS
 
 
-       punk::args::get_dict {
+       punk::args::parse [list $category $another_leading_arg] withdef {
            category                -choices {cat1 cat2 cat3}
            another_leading_arg     -type boolean
-       } [list $category $another_leading_arg]
+       }
 
 .CE
 .SS NOTES
@@ -488,7 +491,7 @@ packages used by punk::args
 \fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
-.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ARGS"
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ARGS::REGISTER"
 .PP
 cooperative namespace punk::args::register
 .PP
@@ -500,7 +503,7 @@ The punk::args package will then test for a public list variable <namepace>::PUN
 .PP
 Core API functions for punk::args
 .TP
-\fBget_dict\fR \fIoptionspecs\fR \fIrawargs\fR
+\fBget_dict\fR \fIdeflist\fR \fIrawargs\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp
 Parse rawargs as a sequence of zero or more option-value pairs followed by zero or more values
 .sp
@@ -509,9 +512,9 @@ Returns a dict of the form: opts <options_dict> values <values_dict>
 ARGUMENTS:
 .RS
 .TP
-multiline-string \fIoptionspecs\fR
+list-of-multiline-string \fIdeflist\fR
 .sp
-This a block of text with records delimited by newlines (lf or crlf) - but with multiline values allowed if properly quoted/braced
+These are blocks of text with records delimited by newlines (lf or crlf) - but with multiline values allowed if properly quoted/braced
 .sp
 \'info complete' is used to determine if a record spans multiple lines due to multiline values
 .sp
@@ -519,7 +522,7 @@ Each optionspec line defining a flag must be of the form:
 .sp
 -optionname -key val -key2 val2\&.\&.\&.
 .sp
-where the valid keys for each option specification are: -default -type -range -choices -optional
+where the valid keys for each option specification are: -default -type -range -choices -optional etc
 .sp
 Each optionspec line defining a positional argument is of the form:
 .sp
@@ -529,9 +532,9 @@ where the valid keys for each option specification are: -default -type -range -c
 .sp
 comment lines begining with # are ignored and can be placed anywhere except within a multiline value where it would become part of that value
 .sp
-lines beginning with *proc *leaders *opts or *values also take -key val pairs and can be used to set defaults and control settings\&.
+lines beginning with @cmd @leaders @opts or @values also take -key val pairs and can be used to set defaults and control settings\&.
 .sp
-*opts or *values lines can appear multiple times with defaults affecting flags/values that follow\&.
+@opts or @values lines can appear multiple times with defaults affecting flags/values that follow\&.
 .TP
 list \fIrawargs\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_assertion-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::assertion \- assertion alternative to control::assert
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::assertion \fR
+package require \fBpunk::assertion\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -307,7 +307,6 @@ packages used by punk::assertion
 .PP
 class definitions
 .PP
-tcl::namespace::import ::punk::assertion::primary::assertActive
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ASSERTION"
 .PP
 Core API functions for punk::assertion

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_basictelnet-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell::basictelnet \- basic telnet client - DKF/Wiki
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::basictelnet \fR
+package require \fBpunk::basictelnet\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -291,6 +291,8 @@ overview of punk::basictelnet
 packages used by punk::basictelnet
 .IP \(bu
 \fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::args\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::BASICTELNET::CLASS"

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_blockletter-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::blockletter \- punk::blockletter frame-based large lettering test/logo
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::blockletter \fR
+package require \fBpunk::blockletter\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -303,6 +303,7 @@ packages used by punk::blockletter
 .PP
 class definitions
 if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 .PP
 }
 }
@@ -317,6 +318,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::blockletter::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::BLOCKLETTER::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_cap-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,14 +274,12 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::cap \- capability provider and handler plugin system
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::cap \fR
+package require \fBpunk::cap\fR
 .sp
 class::interface_caphandler\&.registry \fBpkg_register\fR \fIpkg\fR \fIcapname\fR \fIcapdict\fR \fIfullcapabilitylist\fR
 .sp
 class::interface_caphandler\&.registry \fBpkg_unregister\fR \fIpkg\fR
 .sp
-class::interface_capprovider\&.registration \fBget_declarations\fR
-.sp
 class::interface_capprovider\&.provider \fBconstructor\fR \fIproviderpkg\fR
 .sp
 class::interface_capprovider\&.provider \fBregister\fR ?capabilityname_glob?
@@ -379,15 +377,6 @@ The above example declares that your package can be registered as a provider for
 .RS
 .sp
 \fIMETHODS\fR
-.TP
-class::interface_capprovider\&.registration \fBget_declarations\fR
-.sp
-This method must be overridden by your provider using oo::objdefine cappprovider\&.registration as in the example above\&.
-There must be at least one 2-element list in the result for the provider to be registerable\&.
-.sp
-The first element of the list is the capabilityname - which can be custom to your provider/handler packages - or a well-known name that other authors may use/implement\&.
-.sp
-The second element is a dictionary of keys specific to the capability being implemented\&. It may be empty if the any potential capability handlers for the named capability don't require registration data\&.
 .RE
 .IP [2]
 CLASS \fBinterface_capprovider\&.provider\fR

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_cesu-0.1.1.tm.n

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 '\"
-'\" Generated from file '_module_cesu-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Generated from file '_module_cesu-0\&.1\&.1\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
 '\" Copyright (c) 2024
 '\"
-.TH "punkshell_module_punk::cesu" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "CESU experimental"
+.TH "punkshell_module_punk::cesu" 0 0\&.1\&.1 doc "CESU experimental"
 .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
 .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
 .\"
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::cesu \- CESU compatibility ehcoding scheme for utf-16: 8-Bit (CESU-8) ??
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::cesu \fR
+package require \fBpunk::cesu\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -307,6 +307,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::cesu::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::CESU::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_char-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::char \- character-set and unicode utilities
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::char \fR
+package require \fBpunk::char\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_console-0.1.1.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::console \- punk console
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::console \fR
+package require \fBpunk::console\fR
 .sp
 \fBcursor_save\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_encmime-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::encmime \- mime encodings related subset of tcllib mime
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::encmime \fR
+package require \fBpunk::encmime\fR
 .sp
 mapencoding \fIenc\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_experiment-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::experiment \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::experiment \fR
+package require \fBpunk::experiment\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_fileline-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::fileline \- file line-handling utilities
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::fileline \fR
+package require \fBpunk::fileline\fR
 .sp
 class::textinfo \fBconstructor\fR \fIdatachunk\fR ?option value\&.\&.\&.?
 .sp
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ datachunk should be passed with the file data including line-endings as-is for f
 .CS
 
 
-    fconfigure $fd -translation binary
+    chan configure $fd -translation binary
     set chunkdata [read $fd]]
 or
     set chunkdata [fileutil::cat <filename> -translation binary]

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_flib-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::flib \- flib experimental
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::flib \fR
+package require \fBpunk::flib\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_icomm-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,326 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_icomm-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_punk::icomm" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_punk::icomm \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::icomm\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::icomm
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::icomm
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::args\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ICOMM::CLASS"
+.PP
+class definitions
+if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+.PP
+}
+}
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ICOMM"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::icomm
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ICOMM::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::icomm::system {
+*** !doctools
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ICOMM::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_imap4-0.9.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_imap4-0\&.9\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "punkshell_module_punk::imap4" 0 0\&.9 doc "IMAP4 client"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+punkshell_module_punk::imap4 \- IMAP4 client
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::imap4\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+An implementation of IMAP4 (rev1+?) client protocol
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::imap4
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::imap4
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\&.2-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::args\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::lib\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::IMAP4"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::imap4
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::IMAP4::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+client, imap, imap4, mail, mailclient, module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_island-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::island \- filesystem islands for safe interps
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::island \fR
+package require \fBpunk::island\fR
 .sp
 \fBadd\fR \fIchild\fR \fIpath\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_lib-0.1.1.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::lib \- punk general utility functions
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::lib \fR
+package require \fBpunk::lib\fR
 .sp
 \fBlremove\fR \fIlist\fR ?index \&.\&.\&.?
 .sp
@@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ options are flags as accepted by lsort ie -ascii -command -decreasing -dictionar
 .TP
 \fBlist_as_lines\fR ?-joinchar char? \fIlinelist\fR
 .sp
-This simply joines the elements of the list with -joinchar
+This simply joins the elements of the list with -joinchar
 .sp
 It is mainly intended for use in pipelines where the primary argument comes at the end - but it can also be used as a general replacement for join $lines <le>
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_lib-0.1.2.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,679 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_lib-0\&.1\&.2\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2024
+'\"
+.TH "punkshell_module_punk::lib" 0 0\&.1\&.2 doc "punk library"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+punkshell_module_punk::lib \- punk general utility functions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::lib\fR
+.sp
+\fBlremove\fR \fIlist\fR ?index \&.\&.\&.?
+.sp
+\fBlpop\fR \fIlistvar\fR ?index?
+.sp
+\fBinvoke\fR \fIcommand\fR
+.sp
+\fBlindex_resolve\fR \fIlen\fR \fIindex\fR
+.sp
+\fBlindex_resolve_basic\fR \fIlen\fR \fIindex\fR
+.sp
+\fBK\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.sp
+\fBis_utf8_multibyteprefix\fR \fIstr\fR
+.sp
+\fBis_utf8_single\fR \fI1234bytes\fR
+.sp
+\fBget_utf8_leading\fR \fIrawbytes\fR
+.sp
+\fBhex2dec\fR ?option value\&.\&.\&.? \fIlist_largeHex\fR
+.sp
+\fBdex2hex\fR ?option value\&.\&.\&.? \fIlist_decimals\fR
+.sp
+\fBlog2\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBlogbase\fR \fIb\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBfactors\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBoddFactors\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBgreatestFactorBelow\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBgreatestOddFactorBelow\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBgreatestOddFactor\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+\fBgcd\fR \fIn\fR \fIm\fR
+.sp
+\fBgcd\fR \fIn\fR \fIm\fR
+.sp
+\fBcommonDivisors\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.sp
+\fBhasglobs\fR \fIstr\fR
+.sp
+\fBtrimzero\fR \fInumber\fR
+.sp
+\fBsubstring_count\fR \fIstr\fR \fIsubstring\fR
+.sp
+\fBdict_merge_ordered\fR \fIdefaults\fR \fImain\fR
+.sp
+\fBaskuser\fR \fIquestion\fR
+.sp
+\fBlinesort\fR ?sortoption ?val?\&.\&.\&.? \fItextblock\fR
+.sp
+\fBlist_as_lines\fR ?-joinchar char? \fIlinelist\fR
+.sp
+\fBlines_as_list\fR ?option value \&.\&.\&.? \fItext\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+This is a set of utility functions that are commonly used across punk modules or are just considered to be general-purpose functions\&.
+.PP
+The base set includes string and math functions but has no specific theme
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::lib
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+The punk::lib modules should have no strong dependencies other than Tcl
+.PP
+Dependendencies that only affect display or additional functionality may be included - but should fail gracefully if not present, and only when a function is called that uses one of these soft dependencies\&.
+.PP
+This requirement for no strong dependencies, means that many utility functions that might otherwise seem worthy of inclusion here are not present\&.
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::lib
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::args\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::LIB::COMPAT"
+.PP
+compatibility functions for features that may not be available in earlier Tcl versions
+.PP
+These are generally 'forward compatibility' functions ie allowing earlier versions to use later features/idioms by using a Tcl-only version of a missing builtin\&.
+.PP
+Such Tcl-only versions will inevitably be less performant - perhaps significantly so\&.
+.TP
+\fBlremove\fR \fIlist\fR ?index \&.\&.\&.?
+.sp
+Forwards compatible lremove for versions 8\&.6 or less to support equivalent 8\&.7 lremove
+.TP
+\fBlpop\fR \fIlistvar\fR ?index?
+.sp
+Forwards compatible lpop for versions 8\&.6 or less to support equivalent 8\&.7 lpop
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::LIB"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::lib
+.TP
+\fBinvoke\fR \fIcommand\fR
+.sp
+Invoke an external command (using tcl open command) capturing stdout,stderr and the exitcode
+.CS
+
+
+    set script {
+       puts stdout {hello on stdout}
+       puts stderr {hello on stderr}
+       exit 42
+    }
+    invoke [list tclsh <<$script]
+
+.CE
+.TP
+\fBlindex_resolve\fR \fIlen\fR \fIindex\fR
+.sp
+Resolve an index which may be of the forms accepted by Tcl list commands such as end-2 or 2+2 to the actual integer index for the supplied list/string length
+.sp
+Users may define procs which accept a list/string index and wish to accept the forms understood by Tcl\&.
+.sp
+This means the proc may be called with something like $x+2  end-$y  etc
+.sp
+Sometimes the actual integer index is desired\&.
+.sp
+We want to resolve the index used, without passing arbitrary expressions into the 'expr' function - which could have security risks\&.
+.sp
+lindex_resolve will parse the index expression and return:
+.sp
+a) -3 if the supplied index expression is below the lower bound for the supplied list\&. (< 0)
+.sp
+b) -2 if the supplied index expression is above the upper bound for the supplied list\&. (> end)
+.sp
+We don't return -1 - as the similar function lindex_resolve_basic uses this to denote out of range at either end of the list/string
+.sp
+Otherwise it will return an integer corresponding to the position in the list\&.
+.sp
+This is in stark contrast to Tcl list function indices which will return empty strings for out of bounds indices, or in the case of lrange, return results anyway\&.
+.sp
+Like Tcl list commands - it will produce an error if the form of the index is not acceptable
+.sp
+For empty lists, end and end+x indices are considered to be out of bounds on the upper side - thus returning -2
+.TP
+\fBlindex_resolve_basic\fR \fIlen\fR \fIindex\fR
+.sp
+Accepts index of the forms accepted by Tcl's list commands\&. (e\&.g compound indices such as 3+1 end-2)
+.sp
+returns -1 for out of range at either end, or a valid integer index
+.sp
+Unlike lindex_resolve; lindex_resolve_basic can't determine if an out of range index was out of range at the lower or upper bound
+.sp
+This is only likely to be faster than average over lindex_resolve for small lists and for Tcl which has the builtin lseq command
+.sp
+The performance advantage is more likely to be present when using compound indexes such as $x+1 or end-1
+.sp
+For pure integer indices the performance should be equivalent
+.TP
+\fBK\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.sp
+The K-combinator function - returns the first argument, x and discards y
+.sp
+see \fIhttps://wiki\&.tcl-lang\&.org/page/K\fR
+.sp
+It is used in cases where command-substitution at the calling-point performs some desired effect\&.
+.TP
+\fBis_utf8_multibyteprefix\fR \fIstr\fR
+.sp
+Returns a boolean if str is potentially a prefix for a multibyte utf-8 character
+.sp
+ie - tests if it is possible that appending more data will result in a utf-8 codepoint
+.sp
+Will return false for an already complete utf-8 codepoint
+.sp
+It is assumed the incomplete sequence is at the beginning of the bytes argument
+.sp
+Suitable input for this might be from the unreturned tail portion of get_utf8_leading $testbytes
+.sp
+e\&.g using: set head [get_utf8_leading $testbytes] ; set tail [string range $testbytes [string length $head] end]
+.TP
+\fBis_utf8_single\fR \fI1234bytes\fR
+.sp
+Tests input of 1,2,3 or 4 bytes and responds with a boolean indicating if it is a valid utf-8 character (codepoint)
+.TP
+\fBget_utf8_leading\fR \fIrawbytes\fR
+.sp
+return the leading portion of rawbytes that is a valid utf8 sequence\&.
+.sp
+This will stop at the point at which the bytes can't be interpreted as a complete utf-8 codepoint
+.sp
+e\&.g It will not return the first byte or 2 of a 3-byte utf-8 character if the last byte is missing, and will return only the valid utf-8 string from before the first byte of the incomplete character\&.
+.sp
+It will also only return the prefix before any bytes that cannot be part of a utf-8 sequence at all\&.
+.sp
+Note that while this will return valid utf8 - it has no knowledge of grapheme clusters or diacritics
+.sp
+This means if it is being used to process bytes split at some arbitrary point - the trailing data that isn't returned could be part of a grapheme cluster that belongs with the last character of the leading string already returned
+.sp
+The utf-8 BOM \\xEF\\xBB\\xBF is a valid UTF8 3-byte sequence and so can also be returned as part of the leading utf8 bytes
+.TP
+\fBhex2dec\fR ?option value\&.\&.\&.? \fIlist_largeHex\fR
+.sp
+Convert a list of (possibly large) unprefixed hex strings to their decimal values
+.sp
+hex2dec accepts and ignores internal underscores in the same manner as Tcl 8\&.7+ numbers e\&.g  hex2dec FF_FF returns 65535
+.sp
+Leading and trailing underscores are ignored as a matter of implementation convenience - but this shouldn't be relied upon\&.
+.sp
+Leading or trailing whitespace in each list member is allowed e\&.g hex2dec " F" returns 15
+.sp
+Internal whitespace e\&.g "F F" is not permitted - but a completely empty element "" is allowed and will return 0
+.TP
+\fBdex2hex\fR ?option value\&.\&.\&.? \fIlist_decimals\fR
+.sp
+Convert a list of decimal integers to a list of hex values
+.sp
+-width <int> can be used to make each hex value at least int characters wide, with leading zeroes\&.
+.sp
+-case upper|lower determines the case of the hex letters in the output
+.TP
+\fBlog2\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+log base2 of x
+.sp
+This uses a 'live' proc body - the divisor for the change of base is computed once at definition time
+.sp
+(courtesy of RS \fIhttps://wiki\&.tcl-lang\&.org/page/Additional+math+functions\fR)
+.TP
+\fBlogbase\fR \fIb\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+log base b of x
+.sp
+This function uses expr's natural log and the change of base division\&.
+.sp
+This means for example that we can get results like: logbase 10 1000 = 2\&.9999999999999996
+.sp
+Use expr's log10() function or tcl::mathfunc::log10 for base 10
+.TP
+\fBfactors\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+Return a sorted list of the positive factors of x where x > 0
+.sp
+For x = 0 we return only 0 and 1 as technically any number divides zero and there are an infinite number of factors\&. (including zero itself in this context)*
+.sp
+This is a simple brute-force implementation that iterates all numbers below the square root of x to check the factors
+.sp
+Because the implementation is so simple - the performance is very reasonable for numbers below at least a few 10's of millions
+.sp
+See tcllib math::numtheory::factors for a more complex implementation - which seems to be slower for 'small' numbers
+.sp
+Comparisons were done with some numbers below 17 digits long
+.sp
+For seriously big numbers - this simple algorithm would no doubt be outperformed by more complex algorithms\&.
+.sp
+The numtheory library stores some data about primes etc with each call - so may become faster when being used on more numbers
+but has the disadvantage of being slower for 'small' numbers and using more memory\&.
+.sp
+If the largest factor below x is needed - the greatestOddFactorBelow and GreatestFactorBelow functions are a faster way to get there than computing the whole list, even for small values of x
+.sp
+* Taking x=0; Notion of x being divisible by integer y being: There exists an integer p such that x = py
+.sp
+In other mathematical contexts zero may be considered not to divide anything\&.
+.TP
+\fBoddFactors\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+Return a list of odd integer factors of x, sorted in ascending order
+.TP
+\fBgreatestFactorBelow\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+Return the largest factor of x excluding itself
+.sp
+factor functions can be useful for console layout calculations
+.sp
+See Tcllib math::numtheory for more extensive implementations
+.TP
+\fBgreatestOddFactorBelow\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+Return the largest odd integer factor of x excluding x itself
+.TP
+\fBgreatestOddFactor\fR \fIx\fR
+.sp
+Return the largest odd integer factor of x
+.sp
+For an odd value of x - this will always return x
+.TP
+\fBgcd\fR \fIn\fR \fIm\fR
+.sp
+Return the greatest common divisor of m and n
+.sp
+Straight from Lars Hellström's math::numtheory library  in Tcllib
+.sp
+Graphical use:
+.sp
+An a by b rectangle can be covered with square tiles of side-length c,
+.sp
+only if c is a common divisor of a and b
+.TP
+\fBgcd\fR \fIn\fR \fIm\fR
+.sp
+Return the lowest common multiple of m and n
+.sp
+Straight from Lars Hellström's math::numtheory library  in Tcllib
+.sp
+.TP
+\fBcommonDivisors\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.sp
+Return a list of all the common factors of x and y
+.sp
+(equivalent to factors of their gcd)
+.TP
+\fBhasglobs\fR \fIstr\fR
+.sp
+Return a boolean indicating whether str contains any of the glob characters: * ? [ ]
+.sp
+hasglobs uses append to preserve Tcls internal representation for str - so it should help avoid shimmering in the few cases where this may matter\&.
+.TP
+\fBtrimzero\fR \fInumber\fR
+.sp
+Return number with left-hand-side zeros trimmed off - unless all zero
+.sp
+If number is all zero - a single 0 is returned
+.TP
+\fBsubstring_count\fR \fIstr\fR \fIsubstring\fR
+.sp
+Search str and return number of occurrences of substring
+.TP
+\fBdict_merge_ordered\fR \fIdefaults\fR \fImain\fR
+.sp
+The standard dict merge accepts multiple dicts with values from dicts to the right (2nd argument) taking precedence\&.
+.sp
+When merging with a dict of default values - this means that any default key/vals that weren't in the main dict appear in the output before the main data\&.
+.sp
+This function merges the two dicts whilst maintaining the key order of main followed by defaults\&.
+.TP
+\fBaskuser\fR \fIquestion\fR
+.sp
+A basic utility to read an answer from stdin
+.sp
+The prompt is written to the terminal and then it waits for a user to type something
+.sp
+stdin is temporarily configured to blocking and then put back in its original state in case it wasn't already so\&.
+.sp
+If the terminal is using punk::console and is in raw mode - the terminal will temporarily be put in line mode\&.
+.sp
+(Generic terminal raw vs linemode detection not yet present)
+.sp
+The user must hit enter to submit the response
+.sp
+The return value is the string if any that was typed prior to hitting enter\&.
+.sp
+The question argument can be manually colourised using the various punk::ansi funcitons
+.CS
+
+
+   set answer [punk::lib::askuser "[a+ green bold]Do you want to proceed? (Y|N)[a]"]
+   if {[string match y* [string tolower $answer]]} {
+       puts "Proceeding"
+   } else {
+       puts "Cancelled by user"
+   }
+
+.CE
+.TP
+\fBlinesort\fR ?sortoption ?val?\&.\&.\&.? \fItextblock\fR
+.sp
+Sort lines in textblock
+.sp
+Returns another textblock with lines sorted
+.sp
+options are flags as accepted by lsort ie -ascii -command -decreasing -dictionary -index -indices -integer -nocase -real -stride -unique
+.TP
+\fBlist_as_lines\fR ?-joinchar char? \fIlinelist\fR
+.sp
+This simply joins the elements of the list with -joinchar
+.sp
+It is mainly intended for use in pipelines where the primary argument comes at the end - but it can also be used as a general replacement for join $lines <le>
+.sp
+The sister function lines_as_list takes a block of text and splits it into lines - but with more options related to trimming the block and/or each line\&.
+.TP
+\fBlines_as_list\fR ?option value \&.\&.\&.? \fItext\fR
+.sp
+Returns a list of possibly trimmed lines depeding on options
+.sp
+The concept of lines is raw lines from splitting on newline after crlf is mapped to lf
+.sp
+- not console lines which may be entirely different due to control characters such as vertical tabs or ANSI movements
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::LIB::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+lib, module, utility
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2024
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_libunknown-0.1.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_libunknown-0\&.1\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_punk::libunknown" 0 0\&.1 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_punk::libunknown \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::libunknown\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::libunknown
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::libunknown
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::LIBUNKNOWN"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::libunknown
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_netbox-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_netbox-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_punk::netbox" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_punk::netbox \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::netbox\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::netbox
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::netbox
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBhttp\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::NETBOX::CLASS"
+.PP
+class definitions
+if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+.PP
+}
+}
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+.SH INTERNAL
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::NETBOX::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::NETBOX"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::netbox
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::NETBOX::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_packagepreference-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::packagepreference \- punkshell package/module loading
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::packagepreference \fR
+package require \fBpunk::packagepreference\fR
 .sp
 \fBuninstall\fR
 .sp
@@ -303,6 +303,7 @@ packages used by punk::packagepreference
 .PP
 class definitions
 if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 .PP
 }
 }
@@ -319,6 +320,8 @@ Return to the previous ::package implementation (This will be the builtin if no
 .sp
 Override ::package builtin (or the current implementation if it has already been renamed/overridden) to check for and prefer lowercase packages/modules
 .sp
+(todo - check info loaded and restrict to existing version as determined from dll/so?)
+.sp
 The overriding package command will call whatever implementation was in place before install to do the actual work - once it has modified 'package require' names to lowercase\&.
 .sp
 This is intended to be in alignment with tip 590 "Recommend lowercase Package Names"
@@ -340,7 +343,6 @@ Return to the standard ::package builtin by calling punk::packagepreference::uni
 Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
-tcl::namespace::eval punk::packagepreference::system {
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PACKAGEPREFERENCE::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_path-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::path \- Filesystem path utilities
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::path \fR
+package require \fBpunk::path\fR
 .sp
 \fBpathglob_as_re\fR \fIpathglob\fR
 .sp
@@ -299,12 +299,15 @@ Filesystem path utility functions
 packages used by punk::path
 .IP \(bu
 \fBTcl 8\&.6-\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBpunk::args\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PATH::CLASS"
 .PP
 class definitions
 if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 .PP
 }
 }

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_pcon-1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_pcon-1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_punk::pcon" 0 1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_punk::pcon \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::pcon\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::pcon
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::pcon
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PCON::CLASS"
+.PP
+class definitions
+if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+.PP
+}
+}
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PCON"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::pcon
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PCON::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::pcon::system {
+*** !doctools
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PCON::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_pipe-1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_pipe-1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_punk::pipe" 0 1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_punk::pipe \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::pipe\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::pipe
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::pipe
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PIPE::CLASS"
+.PP
+class definitions
+if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+.PP
+}
+}
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PIPE"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::pipe
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PIPE::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::pipe::system {
+*** !doctools
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::PIPE::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_rest-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::rest \- punk::rest
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::rest \fR
+package require \fBpunk::rest\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -297,6 +297,7 @@ packages used by punk::rest
 .PP
 class definitions
 if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 .PP
 }
 }
@@ -311,6 +312,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::rest::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::REST::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_safe-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::safe \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::safe \fR
+package require \fBpunk::safe\fR
 .sp
 \fBsetSyncMode\fR \fIargs\fR
 .sp
@@ -297,14 +297,6 @@ packages used by punk::safe
 \fBpunk::args\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
-.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::SAFE::CLASS"
-.PP
-class definitions
-if { eq ""} {
-.PP
-}
-}
-++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::SAFE::LIB"
 .PP
 Secondary functions that are part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_sixel-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::sixel \- punk::sixel API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::sixel \fR
+package require \fBpunk::sixel\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -301,14 +301,6 @@ packages used by punk::sixel
 \fBpunk::ansi\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
-.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::SIXEL::CLASS"
-.PP
-class definitions
-if { eq ""} {
-.PP
-}
-}
-++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::SIXEL"
 .PP
 Core API functions for punk::sixel

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_sshrun-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::sshrun \- Tcl procedures to execute tcl scripts in remote hosts
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::sshrun \fR
+package require \fBpunk::sshrun\fR
 .sp
 connect \fIargs\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_trie-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::trie \- punk::trie API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::trie \fR
+package require \fBpunk::trie\fR
 .sp
 class::trieclass \fBmatches\fR \fIt\fR \fIwhat\fR
 .sp
@@ -313,6 +313,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::trie::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::TRIE::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_uc-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::uc \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::uc \fR
+package require \fBpunk::uc\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_winlnk-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::winlnk \- windows shortcut \&.lnk library
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::winlnk \fR
+package require \fBpunk::winlnk\fR
 .sp
 \fBfile_check_header\fR \fIpath\fR
 .sp
@@ -305,6 +305,7 @@ packages used by punk::winlnk
 .PP
 class definitions
 if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
 .PP
 }
 }
@@ -331,6 +332,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::winlnk::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::WINLNK::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_winshell-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_winshell-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_punk::winshell" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_punk::winshell \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBpunk::winshell\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of punk::winshell
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by punk::winshell
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::WINSHELL::CLASS"
+.PP
+class definitions
+if { eq ""} {
+*** !doctools
+.PP
+}
+}
+++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::WINSHELL"
+.PP
+Core API functions for punk::winshell
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::WINSHELL::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH INTERNAL
+tcl::namespace::eval punk::winshell::system {
+*** !doctools
+.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::WINSHELL::SYSTEM"
+.PP
+Internal functions that are not part of the API
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/_module_zip-0.1.1.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::zip \- Module API
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::zip \fR
+package require \fBpunk::zip\fR
 .sp
 \fBTimet_to_dos\fR \fItime_t\fR
 .sp

src/embedded/man/files/punk/ansi/_module_colourmap-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -0,0 +1,310 @@
+'\"
+'\" Generated from file '_module_colourmap-0\&.1\&.0\&.tm\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2025
+'\"
+.TH "shellspy_module_::punk::ansi::colourmap" 0 0\&.1\&.0 doc "-"
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
+.nr ^l \n(.l
+.ad b
+.\"	# Start an argument description
+.de AP
+.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
+.el \{\
+.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
+.   el          .TP 15
+.\}
+.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
+.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
+.\".b
+.\}
+.el \{\
+.br
+.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
+\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
+.\}
+.el \{\
+\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
+.\}
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.de AS
+.nr )A 10n
+.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
+.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
+.\"
+.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
+.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
+..
+.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
+.de BS
+.br
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 1u
+.if n .nf
+.if n .ti 0
+.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
+.if n .fi
+..
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.de BE
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
+.el \{\
+.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
+.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.el \}\
+\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
+.\}
+.\}
+.fi
+.br
+.nr ^b 0
+..
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.de VS
+.if !"\\$2"" .br
+.mk ^Y
+.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
+.el .nr ^v 1u
+..
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.de VE
+.ie n 'mc
+.el \{\
+.ev 2
+.nf
+.ti 0
+.mk ^t
+\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
+.sp -1
+.fi
+.ev
+.\}
+.nr ^v 0
+..
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
+.de ^B
+.ev 2
+'ti 0
+'nf
+.mk ^t
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
+.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
+.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
+\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
+.\}
+.bp
+'fi
+.ev
+.if \\n(^b \{\
+.mk ^y
+.nr ^b 2
+.\}
+.if \\n(^v \{\
+.mk ^Y
+.\}
+..
+.\"	# DS - begin display
+.de DS
+.RS
+.nf
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# DE - end display
+.de DE
+.fi
+.RE
+.sp
+..
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
+.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 5.5c 11c
+.ft B
+..
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.de SE
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
+..
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.de OP
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta 4c
+Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
+Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
+Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
+.fi
+.IP
+..
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.de CS
+.RS
+.nf
+.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
+..
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.de CE
+.fi
+.RE
+..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
+.de UL
+\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
+..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+shellspy_module_::punk::ansi::colourmap \- Module API
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fB::punk::ansi::colourmap\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+-
+.SH OVERVIEW
+.PP
+overview of ::punk::ansi::colourmap
+.SS CONCEPTS
+.PP
+-
+.SS DEPENDENCIES
+.PP
+packages used by ::punk::ansi::colourmap
+.IP \(bu
+\fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
+.PP
+.SH API
+.SS "NAMESPACE ::PUNK::ANSI::COLOURMAP"
+.PP
+Core API functions for ::punk::ansi::colourmap
+.PP
+.SS "NAMESPACE ::PUNK::ANSI::COLOURMAP::LIB"
+.PP
+Secondary functions that are part of the API
+.PP
+.SH KEYWORDS
+module
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 2025
+
+.fi

src/embedded/man/files/punk/args/_module_tclcore-0.1.0.tm.n

@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .SH NAME
 punkshell_module_punk::args::tclcore \- punk::args definitions for tcl core commands
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-package require \fBpunk::args::tclcore \fR
+package require \fBpunk::args::tclcore\fR
 .sp
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -293,16 +293,10 @@ packages used by punk::args::tclcore
 \fBTcl 8\&.6\fR
 .IP \(bu
 \fBpunk::args\fR
+.IP \(bu
+\fBtextblock\fR
 .PP
 .SH API
-.SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ARGS::TCLCORE::CLASS"
-.PP
-class definitions
-if { eq ""} {
-.PP
-}
-}
-++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++ +++
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ARGS::TCLCORE"
 .PP
 Core API functions for punk::args::tclcore
@@ -313,6 +307,7 @@ Secondary functions that are part of the API
 .PP
 .SH INTERNAL
 tcl::namespace::eval punk::args::tclcore::system {
+*** !doctools
 .SS "NAMESPACE PUNK::ARGS::TCLCORE::SYSTEM"
 .PP
 Internal functions that are not part of the API